blob: b1f9bff5377fff291e2fb41cfc466714def99698 [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
14#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000015#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
16#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
17#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
18#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
19#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
20#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000021#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000022#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000023#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000024#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000025#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000026#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000027#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
28#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
29#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
30#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
31#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
32#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
33#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
34#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
35#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
36#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
37#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000038#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000039#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000040#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000041#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000042#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000043#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
44#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000045#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000046#include <algorithm>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000047#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000048#include <set>
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000049using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000050using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000051
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000052#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
53
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000054static cl::opt<unsigned>
55PHINodeFoldingThreshold("phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(1),
56 cl::desc("Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 1)"));
57
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000058static cl::opt<bool>
59DupRet("simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
60 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
61
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000062static cl::opt<bool>
63SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
64 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
65
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +000066static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
67 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
68 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +000069
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +000070STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +000071STATISTIC(NumLookupTables, "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +000072STATISTIC(NumLookupTablesHoles, "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000073STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons, "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +000074STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +000075
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +000076namespace {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +000077 /// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
78 struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
79 ConstantInt *Value;
80 BasicBlock *Dest;
81
82 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
83 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
84
85 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
86 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
87 return Value < RHS.Value;
88 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +000089
90 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +000091 };
92
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +000093class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +000094 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +000095 const DataLayout *const DL;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +000096 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
97 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TerminatorInst *TI,
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +000098 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +000099 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000100 BasicBlock *Pred,
101 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000102 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
103 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000104
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000105 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000106 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000107 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000108 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000109 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +0000110 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder <> &Builder);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000111 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder <>&Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000112
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000113public:
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000114 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout *DL)
115 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL) {}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000116 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
117};
118}
119
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000120/// SafeToMergeTerminators - Return true if it is safe to merge these two
121/// terminator instructions together.
122///
123static bool SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2) {
124 if (SI1 == SI2) return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000125
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000126 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
127 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
128 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
129 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
130 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Chris Lattnerb7b75142007-04-02 01:44:59 +0000131 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000132
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000133 for (succ_iterator I = succ_begin(SI2BB), E = succ_end(SI2BB); I != E; ++I)
134 if (SI1Succs.count(*I))
135 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = (*I)->begin();
136 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
137 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
138 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
139 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB))
140 return false;
141 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000142
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000143 return true;
144}
145
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000146/// isProfitableToFoldUnconditional - Return true if it is safe and profitable
147/// to merge these two terminator instructions together, where SI1 is an
148/// unconditional branch. PhiNodes will store all PHI nodes in common
149/// successors.
150///
151static bool isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1,
152 BranchInst *SI2,
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000153 Instruction *Cond,
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000154 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode*> &PhiNodes) {
155 if (SI1 == SI2) return false; // Can't merge with self!
156 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
157
158 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000159 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000160 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
161 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
162 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
163 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
164 if (!Ci2) return false;
165 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
166 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
167 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
168 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
169 return false;
170
171 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
172 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
173 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
174 for (succ_iterator I = succ_begin(SI2BB), E = succ_end(SI2BB); I != E; ++I)
175 if (SI1Succs.count(*I))
176 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = (*I)->begin();
177 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
178 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
179 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000180 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000181 return false;
182 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
183 }
184 return true;
185}
186
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000187/// AddPredecessorToBlock - Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will
188/// now be entries in it from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be
189/// flowing into the PHI nodes will be the same as those coming in from
190/// ExistPred, an existing predecessor of Succ.
191static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
192 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000193 if (!isa<PHINode>(Succ->begin())) return; // Quick exit if nothing to do
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000194
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000195 PHINode *PN;
196 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
197 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)); ++I)
198 PN->addIncoming(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000199}
200
David Majnemer91142c42013-06-01 19:43:23 +0000201/// ComputeSpeculationCost - Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000202/// given instruction, which is assumed to be safe to speculate. 1 means
203/// cheap, 2 means less cheap, and UINT_MAX means prohibitively expensive.
204static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I) {
205 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
206 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
207 switch (Operator::getOpcode(I)) {
208 default:
209 // In doubt, be conservative.
210 return UINT_MAX;
211 case Instruction::GetElementPtr:
212 // GEPs are cheap if all indices are constant.
213 if (!cast<GEPOperator>(I)->hasAllConstantIndices())
214 return UINT_MAX;
215 return 1;
Louis Gerbarg1f54b822014-05-09 17:02:46 +0000216 case Instruction::ExtractValue:
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000217 case Instruction::Load:
218 case Instruction::Add:
219 case Instruction::Sub:
220 case Instruction::And:
221 case Instruction::Or:
222 case Instruction::Xor:
223 case Instruction::Shl:
224 case Instruction::LShr:
225 case Instruction::AShr:
226 case Instruction::ICmp:
227 case Instruction::Trunc:
228 case Instruction::ZExt:
229 case Instruction::SExt:
Matt Arsenaultc8fc08c2014-05-30 18:34:43 +0000230 case Instruction::BitCast:
231 case Instruction::ExtractElement:
232 case Instruction::InsertElement:
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000233 return 1; // These are all cheap.
234
235 case Instruction::Call:
236 case Instruction::Select:
237 return 2;
238 }
239}
240
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000241/// DominatesMergePoint - If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as
242/// accepted above, return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
243/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
244/// which works well enough for us.
245///
246/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000247/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
248/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
249/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
250/// set and true is returned.
251///
252/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
253/// Select whose cost is 2.
254///
255/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
256/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
257/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000258static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000259 SmallPtrSet<Instruction*, 4> *AggressiveInsts,
260 unsigned &CostRemaining) {
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000261 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000262 if (!I) {
263 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
264 // can be executed unconditionally.
265 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
266 if (C->canTrap())
267 return false;
268 return true;
269 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000270 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000271
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000272 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000273 // the bottom of this block.
274 if (PBB == BB) return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000275
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000276 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
277 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000278 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
279 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000280 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000281 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000282
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000283 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
284 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000285 if (!AggressiveInsts) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000286
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000287 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
288 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I)) return true;
289
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000290 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
291 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
292 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Dan Gohman75d7d5e2011-12-14 23:49:11 +0000293 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000294 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000295
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000296 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000297
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000298 if (Cost > CostRemaining)
299 return false;
300
301 CostRemaining -= Cost;
302
303 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
304 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000305 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000306 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000307 return false;
308 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
309 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000310 return true;
311}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000312
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000313/// GetConstantInt - Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
314/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000315static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout *DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000316 // Normal constant int.
317 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000318 if (CI || !DL || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000319 return CI;
320
321 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
322 // ConstantInt if possible.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000323 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL->getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000324
325 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
326 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
327 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
328
329 // IntToPtr const int.
330 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
331 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
332 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
333 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
334 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
335 return CI;
336 else
337 return cast<ConstantInt>
338 (ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
339 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000340 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000341}
342
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000343/// GatherConstantCompares - Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together
344/// collection of icmp eq/ne instructions that compare a value against a
345/// constant, return the value being compared, and stick the constant into the
346/// Values vector.
Chris Lattner11dafaa2010-12-13 03:30:12 +0000347static Value *
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000348GatherConstantCompares(Value *V, std::vector<ConstantInt*> &Vals, Value *&Extra,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000349 const DataLayout *DL, bool isEQ, unsigned &UsedICmps) {
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000350 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000351 if (!I) return nullptr;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000352
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000353 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000354 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000355 if (ConstantInt *C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)) {
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +0000356 Value *RHSVal;
357 ConstantInt *RHSC;
358
Chris Lattnerd14b0f12010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000359 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ:ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +0000360 // (x & ~2^x) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^x
361 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
362 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
363 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_ConstantInt(RHSC)))) {
364 APInt Not = ~RHSC->getValue();
365 if (Not.isPowerOf2()) {
366 Vals.push_back(C);
367 Vals.push_back(
368 ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(), C->getValue() | Not));
369 UsedICmps++;
370 return RHSVal;
371 }
372 }
373
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000374 UsedICmps++;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000375 Vals.push_back(C);
376 return I->getOperand(0);
377 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000378
Chris Lattnerd14b0f12010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000379 // If we have "x ult 3" comparison, for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to
380 // the set.
381 ConstantRange Span =
Chris Lattner6b8b4852010-12-18 20:22:49 +0000382 ConstantRange::makeICmpRegion(ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000383
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +0000384 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
385 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
386 bool hasAdd =
387 match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_ConstantInt(RHSC)));
388 if (hasAdd)
389 Span = Span.subtract(RHSC->getValue());
390
Chris Lattnerd14b0f12010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000391 // If this is an and/!= check then we want to optimize "x ugt 2" into
392 // x != 0 && x != 1.
393 if (!isEQ)
394 Span = Span.inverse();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000395
Chris Lattnerd14b0f12010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000396 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
Nick Lewycky219e6bc2012-01-19 18:19:42 +0000397 if (Span.getSetSize().ugt(8) || Span.isEmptySet())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000398 return nullptr;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000399
Chris Lattnerd14b0f12010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000400 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
401 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(V->getContext(), Tmp));
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000402 UsedICmps++;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +0000403 return hasAdd ? RHSVal : I->getOperand(0);
Chris Lattnerd14b0f12010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000404 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000405 return nullptr;
Chris Lattner9b1af512010-12-13 04:18:32 +0000406 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000407
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000408 // Otherwise, we can only handle an | or &, depending on isEQ.
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000409 if (I->getOpcode() != (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000410 return nullptr;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000411
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000412 unsigned NumValsBeforeLHS = Vals.size();
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000413 unsigned UsedICmpsBeforeLHS = UsedICmps;
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000414 if (Value *LHS = GatherConstantCompares(I->getOperand(0), Vals, Extra, DL,
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000415 isEQ, UsedICmps)) {
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000416 unsigned NumVals = Vals.size();
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000417 unsigned UsedICmpsBeforeRHS = UsedICmps;
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000418 if (Value *RHS = GatherConstantCompares(I->getOperand(1), Vals, Extra, DL,
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000419 isEQ, UsedICmps)) {
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000420 if (LHS == RHS)
421 return LHS;
Chris Lattner79db3572010-12-13 07:41:29 +0000422 Vals.resize(NumVals);
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000423 UsedICmps = UsedICmpsBeforeRHS;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000424 }
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000425
426 // The RHS of the or/and can't be folded in and we haven't used "Extra" yet,
427 // set it and return success.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000428 if (Extra == nullptr || Extra == I->getOperand(1)) {
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000429 Extra = I->getOperand(1);
430 return LHS;
431 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000432
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000433 Vals.resize(NumValsBeforeLHS);
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000434 UsedICmps = UsedICmpsBeforeLHS;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000435 return nullptr;
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000436 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000437
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000438 // If the LHS can't be folded in, but Extra is available and RHS can, try to
439 // use LHS as Extra.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000440 if (Extra == nullptr || Extra == I->getOperand(0)) {
Chris Lattner79db3572010-12-13 07:41:29 +0000441 Value *OldExtra = Extra;
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000442 Extra = I->getOperand(0);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000443 if (Value *RHS = GatherConstantCompares(I->getOperand(1), Vals, Extra, DL,
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000444 isEQ, UsedICmps))
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000445 return RHS;
Chris Lattner79db3572010-12-13 07:41:29 +0000446 assert(Vals.size() == NumValsBeforeLHS);
447 Extra = OldExtra;
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000448 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000449
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000450 return nullptr;
Chris Lattner6f4b45a2004-02-24 05:38:11 +0000451}
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000452
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000453static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000454 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000455 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
456 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
457 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
458 if (BI->isConditional())
459 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000460 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
461 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000462 }
463
464 TI->eraseFromParent();
465 if (Cond) RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
466}
467
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000468/// isValueEqualityComparison - Return true if the specified terminator checks
469/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000470Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000471 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000472 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
473 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
474 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000475 if (SI->getNumSuccessors()*std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()),
476 pred_end(SI->getParent())) <= 128)
477 CV = SI->getCondition();
478 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000479 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000480 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition()))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000481 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000482 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
483
484 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000485 if (DL && CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000486 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
487 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000488 if (PTII->getType() == DL->getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000489 CV = Ptr;
490 }
491 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000492 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000493}
494
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000495/// GetValueEqualityComparisonCases - Given a value comparison instruction,
496/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000497BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000498GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TerminatorInst *TI,
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000499 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase>
500 &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000501 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000502 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
503 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e; ++i)
504 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(i.getCaseValue(),
505 i.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000506 return SI->getDefaultDest();
507 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000508
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000509 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000510 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000511 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
512 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1),
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000513 DL),
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000514 Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000515 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000516}
517
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000518
519/// EliminateBlockCases - Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
520/// in the list that match the specified block.
521static void EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
522 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000523 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000524}
525
526/// ValuesOverlap - Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as
527/// well.
528static bool
529ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
530 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase > &C2) {
531 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
532
533 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
534 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
535 std::swap(V1, V2);
536
537 if (V1->size() == 0) return false;
538 if (V1->size() == 1) {
539 // Just scan V2.
540 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
541 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
542 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
543 return true;
544 }
545
546 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
547 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
548 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
549 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
550 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
551 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
552 return true;
553 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
554 ++i1;
555 else
556 ++i2;
557 }
558 return false;
559}
560
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000561/// SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor - If TI is known to be a
562/// terminator instruction and its block is known to only have a single
563/// predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is also a value
564/// comparison with the same value, and if that comparison determines the
565/// outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a very limited
566/// form of jump threading.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000567bool SimplifyCFGOpt::
568SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000569 BasicBlock *Pred,
570 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000571 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
572 if (!PredVal) return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
573
574 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
575 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
576 if (ThisVal != PredVal) return false; // Different predicates.
577
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000578 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
579 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
580
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000581 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000582 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000583 BasicBlock *PredDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(),
584 PredCases);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000585 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000586
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000587 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000588 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000589 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000590 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000591
592 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
593 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
594 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
595 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
596 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
597 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000598 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000599 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000600
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000601 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
602 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
603 // uncond br.
604 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
605 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000606 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000607 (void) NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000608
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000609 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000610 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000611
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000612 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
613 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000614
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000615 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
616 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000617 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000618
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000619 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
620 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000621 SmallPtrSet<Constant*, 16> DeadCases;
622 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
623 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000624
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000625 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000626 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000627
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000628 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
629 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
630 MDNode* MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
631 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
632 if (HasWeight)
633 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
634 ++MD_i) {
635 ConstantInt* CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
636 assert(CI);
637 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
638 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000639 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
640 --i;
641 if (DeadCases.count(i.getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000642 if (HasWeight) {
643 std::swap(Weights[i.getCaseIndex()+1], Weights.back());
644 Weights.pop_back();
645 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000646 i.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
647 SI->removeCase(i);
648 }
649 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000650 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000651 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
652 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).
653 createBranchWeights(Weights));
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000654
655 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000656 return true;
657 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000658
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000659 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
660 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000661 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000662 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000663 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
664 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000665 if (TIV)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000666 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
667 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
668 }
669 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000670
671 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
672 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000673 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000674 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
675 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
676 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
677 break;
678 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000679
680 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000681 if (!TheRealDest) TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000682
683 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
684 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
685 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(TIBB), e = succ_end(TIBB); SI != e; ++SI)
686 if (*SI != CheckEdge)
687 (*SI)->removePredecessor(TIBB);
688 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000689 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000690
691 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000692 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000693 (void) NI;
694
695 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
696 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI << "\n");
697
698 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
699 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000700}
701
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000702namespace {
703 /// ConstantIntOrdering - This class implements a stable ordering of constant
704 /// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
705 /// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
706 struct ConstantIntOrdering {
707 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
708 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
709 }
710 };
711}
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000712
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000713static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
714 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
715 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
716 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000717 if (LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()))
718 return 1;
719 if (LHS->getValue() == RHS->getValue())
720 return 0;
721 return -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000722}
723
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000724static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction* I) {
725 MDNode* ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
726 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
727 if (MDString* MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
728 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
729
730 return false;
731}
732
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000733/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
734/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
735/// metadata.
736static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
737 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
738 MDNode* MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
739 assert(MD);
740 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000741 ConstantInt *CI = cast<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000742 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000743 }
744
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000745 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
746 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
747 // default weight to be the first entry.
748 if (BranchInst* BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
749 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
750 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
751 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
752 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000753 }
754}
755
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000756/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000757static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000758 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
759 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
760 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
761 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
762 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000763 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000764}
765
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000766/// FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors - The specified terminator is a value
767/// equality comparison instruction (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
768/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
769/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000770bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
771 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000772 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
773 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
774 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
775 bool Changed = false;
776
Chris Lattner6b39cb92008-02-18 07:42:56 +0000777 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000778 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +0000779 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000780
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000781 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
782 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
783 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
784
785 if (PCV == CV && SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI)) {
786 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000787 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000788 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
789
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000790 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000791 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
792
793 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
794 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
795 // build.
Chris Lattner6b39cb92008-02-18 07:42:56 +0000796 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000797
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000798 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
799 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000800 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
801 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
802
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000803 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000804 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000805 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000806 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
807 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
808 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000809 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
810 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
811 // successor's weights
812 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000813
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000814 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000815 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000816 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000817 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000818 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
819 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
820 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000821 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000822
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000823 if (PredDefault == BB) {
824 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
825 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000826 std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
827 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
828 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
829 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
830 else {
831 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
832 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000833
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000834 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
835 // Increase weight for the default case.
836 Weights[0] += Weights[i+1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000837 std::swap(Weights[i+1], Weights.back());
838 Weights.pop_back();
839 }
840
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000841 PredCases.pop_back();
842 --i; --e;
843 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000844
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000845 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000846 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
847 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
848 PredDefault = BBDefault;
849 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
850 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000851
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000852 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
853 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000854 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
855 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
856 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
857 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
858 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000859 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
860 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
861 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
862 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
863 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i+1]);
864 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i+1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000865 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000866 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000867
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000868 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
869 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
870 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
871 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
872 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
873 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
874 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
875 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000876 } else {
877 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
878 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
879 // activated.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000880 std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000881 std::map<ConstantInt*, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000882 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
883 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
884 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000885
886 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
887 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i+1];
888 std::swap(Weights[i+1], Weights.back());
889 Weights.pop_back();
890 }
891
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000892 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
893 PredCases.pop_back();
894 --i; --e;
895 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000896
897 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
898 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000899 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
900 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
901 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000902 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
903 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000904 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
905 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
906 PTIHandled.erase(BBCases[i].Value);// This constant is taken care of
907 }
908
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000909 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
910 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000911 for (std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering>::iterator I =
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000912 PTIHandled.begin(),
913 E = PTIHandled.end(); I != E; ++I) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +0000914 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
915 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[*I]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000916 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(*I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000917 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000918 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000919 }
920
921 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
922 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
923 // successors.
924 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSuccessors.size(); i != e; ++i)
925 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessors[i], Pred, BB);
926
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000927 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000928 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +0000929 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000930 assert(DL && "Cannot switch on pointer without DataLayout");
931 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL->getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000932 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000933 }
934
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000935 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000936 SwitchInst *NewSI = Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault,
937 PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +0000938 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000939 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
940 NewSI->addCase(PredCases[i].Value, PredCases[i].Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +0000941
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000942 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
943 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
944 FitWeights(Weights);
945
946 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
947
948 NewSI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
949 MDBuilder(BB->getContext()).
950 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
951 }
952
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000953 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +0000954
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000955 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
956 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
957 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000958 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000959 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
960 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000961 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000962 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000963 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +0000964 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
965 "infloop", BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +0000966 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000967 }
968 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
969 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000970
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000971 Changed = true;
972 }
973 }
974 return Changed;
975}
976
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +0000977// isSafeToHoistInvoke - If we would need to insert a select that uses the
978// value of this invoke (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we
979// would need to do this), we can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere
980// to put the select in this case.
981static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
982 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
983 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) {
984 PHINode *PN;
985 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin();
986 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
987 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
988 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
989 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V==I1 || BB2V==I2)) {
990 return false;
991 }
992 }
993 }
994 return true;
995}
996
Chris Lattnerd683bdd2005-08-03 17:59:45 +0000997/// HoistThenElseCodeToIf - Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000998/// BB2, hoist any common code in the two blocks up into the branch block. The
999/// caller of this function guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Rafael Espindola964602d2011-05-19 02:26:30 +00001000static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001001 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1002 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1003 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1004 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1005 // identical order.
1006 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1007 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
1008
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001009 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1010 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1011
1012 Instruction *I1 = BB1_Itr++, *I2 = BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001013 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1014 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1015 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1016 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1017 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1018 I1 = BB1_Itr++;
1019 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1020 I2 = BB2_Itr++;
1021 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001022 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001023 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001024 return false;
1025
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001026 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001027
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001028 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001029 do {
1030 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1031 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1032 if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1))
1033 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001034
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001035 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1036 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1037 // the now redundant second instruction.
1038 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI, BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1039 if (!I2->use_empty())
1040 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
Dan Gohmanc8a27f22009-08-25 22:11:20 +00001041 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001042 I2->eraseFromParent();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001043 Changed = true;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001044
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001045 I1 = BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001046 I2 = BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001047 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1048 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1049 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1050 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1051 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1052 I1 = BB1_Itr++;
1053 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1054 I2 = BB2_Itr++;
1055 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001056 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001057
1058 return true;
1059
1060HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001061 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1062 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001063 return Changed;
1064
1065 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) {
1066 PHINode *PN;
1067 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin();
1068 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1069 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1070 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1071 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1072 continue;
1073
1074 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
1075 return Changed;
1076 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
1077 return Changed;
1078 }
1079 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001080
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001081 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001082 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001083 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI, NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001084 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001085 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1086 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001087 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001088 }
1089
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001090 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001091 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1092 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1093 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1094 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
1095 std::map<std::pair<Value*,Value*>, SelectInst*> InsertedSelects;
1096 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) {
1097 PHINode *PN;
1098 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin();
Chris Lattner01944572004-11-30 07:47:34 +00001099 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001100 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1101 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001102 if (BB1V == BB2V) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001103
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001104 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1105 // that determines the right value.
1106 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001107 if (!SI)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001108 SI = cast<SelectInst>
1109 (Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1110 BB1V->getName()+"."+BB2V->getName()));
1111
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001112 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
1113 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1114 if (PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1115 PN->setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001116 }
1117 }
1118
1119 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
1120 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI)
1121 AddPredecessorToBlock(*SI, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001122
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001123 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001124 return true;
1125}
1126
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001127/// SinkThenElseCodeToEnd - Given an unconditional branch that goes to BBEnd,
1128/// check whether BBEnd has only two predecessors and the other predecessor
1129/// ends with an unconditional branch. If it is true, sink any common code
1130/// in the two predecessors to BBEnd.
1131static bool SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BranchInst *BI1) {
1132 assert(BI1->isUnconditional());
1133 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI1->getParent();
1134 BasicBlock *BBEnd = BI1->getSuccessor(0);
1135
1136 // Check that BBEnd has two predecessors and the other predecessor ends with
1137 // an unconditional branch.
Benjamin Kramerf064b652012-09-30 21:03:56 +00001138 pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BBEnd), PE = pred_end(BBEnd);
1139 BasicBlock *Pred0 = *PI++;
1140 if (PI == PE) // Only one predecessor.
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001141 return false;
Benjamin Kramerf064b652012-09-30 21:03:56 +00001142 BasicBlock *Pred1 = *PI++;
1143 if (PI != PE) // More than two predecessors.
1144 return false;
1145 BasicBlock *BB2 = (Pred0 == BB1) ? Pred1 : Pred0;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001146 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB2->getTerminator());
1147 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isUnconditional())
1148 return false;
1149
1150 // Gather the PHI nodes in BBEnd.
1151 std::map<Value*, std::pair<Value*, PHINode*> > MapValueFromBB1ToBB2;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001152 Instruction *FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = nullptr;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001153 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BBEnd->begin(), E = BBEnd->end();
1154 I != E; ++I) {
1155 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)) {
1156 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001157 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001158 MapValueFromBB1ToBB2[BB1V] = std::make_pair(BB2V, PN);
1159 } else {
1160 FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = &*I;
1161 break;
1162 }
1163 }
1164 if (!FirstNonPhiInBBEnd)
1165 return false;
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001166
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001167
1168 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1169 // instructions in the two blocks. We scan backward for obviously identical
1170 // instructions in an identical order.
1171 BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RI1 = BB1->getInstList().rbegin(),
1172 RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend(), RI2 = BB2->getInstList().rbegin(),
1173 RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend();
1174 // Skip debug info.
1175 while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1)) ++RI1;
1176 if (RI1 == RE1)
1177 return false;
1178 while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2)) ++RI2;
1179 if (RI2 == RE2)
1180 return false;
1181 // Skip the unconditional branches.
1182 ++RI1;
1183 ++RI2;
1184
1185 bool Changed = false;
1186 while (RI1 != RE1 && RI2 != RE2) {
1187 // Skip debug info.
1188 while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1)) ++RI1;
1189 if (RI1 == RE1)
1190 return Changed;
1191 while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2)) ++RI2;
1192 if (RI2 == RE2)
1193 return Changed;
1194
1195 Instruction *I1 = &*RI1, *I2 = &*RI2;
1196 // I1 and I2 should have a single use in the same PHI node, and they
1197 // perform the same operation.
1198 // Cannot move control-flow-involving, volatile loads, vaarg, etc.
1199 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || isa<PHINode>(I2) ||
1200 isa<TerminatorInst>(I1) || isa<TerminatorInst>(I2) ||
1201 isa<LandingPadInst>(I1) || isa<LandingPadInst>(I2) ||
1202 isa<AllocaInst>(I1) || isa<AllocaInst>(I2) ||
1203 I1->mayHaveSideEffects() || I2->mayHaveSideEffects() ||
1204 I1->mayReadOrWriteMemory() || I2->mayReadOrWriteMemory() ||
1205 !I1->hasOneUse() || !I2->hasOneUse() ||
1206 MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.find(I1) == MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.end() ||
1207 MapValueFromBB1ToBB2[I1].first != I2)
1208 return Changed;
1209
1210 // Check whether we should swap the operands of ICmpInst.
1211 ICmpInst *ICmp1 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I1), *ICmp2 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I2);
1212 bool SwapOpnds = false;
1213 if (ICmp1 && ICmp2 &&
1214 ICmp1->getOperand(0) != ICmp2->getOperand(0) &&
1215 ICmp1->getOperand(1) != ICmp2->getOperand(1) &&
1216 (ICmp1->getOperand(0) == ICmp2->getOperand(1) ||
1217 ICmp1->getOperand(1) == ICmp2->getOperand(0))) {
1218 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1219 SwapOpnds = true;
1220 }
1221 if (!I1->isSameOperationAs(I2)) {
1222 if (SwapOpnds)
1223 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1224 return Changed;
1225 }
1226
1227 // The operands should be either the same or they need to be generated
1228 // with a PHI node after sinking. We only handle the case where there is
1229 // a single pair of different operands.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001230 Value *DifferentOp1 = nullptr, *DifferentOp2 = nullptr;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001231 unsigned Op1Idx = 0;
1232 for (unsigned I = 0, E = I1->getNumOperands(); I != E; ++I) {
1233 if (I1->getOperand(I) == I2->getOperand(I))
1234 continue;
1235 // Early exit if we have more-than one pair of different operands or
1236 // the different operand is already in MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.
1237 // Early exit if we need a PHI node to replace a constant.
1238 if (DifferentOp1 ||
1239 MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.find(I1->getOperand(I)) !=
1240 MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.end() ||
1241 isa<Constant>(I1->getOperand(I)) ||
1242 isa<Constant>(I2->getOperand(I))) {
1243 // If we can't sink the instructions, undo the swapping.
1244 if (SwapOpnds)
1245 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1246 return Changed;
1247 }
1248 DifferentOp1 = I1->getOperand(I);
1249 Op1Idx = I;
1250 DifferentOp2 = I2->getOperand(I);
1251 }
1252
1253 // We insert the pair of different operands to MapValueFromBB1ToBB2 and
1254 // remove (I1, I2) from MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.
1255 if (DifferentOp1) {
1256 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(DifferentOp1->getType(), 2,
1257 DifferentOp1->getName() + ".sink",
1258 BBEnd->begin());
1259 MapValueFromBB1ToBB2[DifferentOp1] = std::make_pair(DifferentOp2, NewPN);
1260 // I1 should use NewPN instead of DifferentOp1.
1261 I1->setOperand(Op1Idx, NewPN);
1262 NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp1, BB1);
1263 NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp2, BB2);
1264 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Create PHI node " << *NewPN << "\n";);
1265 }
1266 PHINode *OldPN = MapValueFromBB1ToBB2[I1].second;
1267 MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.erase(I1);
1268
1269 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK common instructions " << *I1 << "\n";);
1270 DEBUG(dbgs() << " " << *I2 << "\n";);
1271 // We need to update RE1 and RE2 if we are going to sink the first
1272 // instruction in the basic block down.
1273 bool UpdateRE1 = (I1 == BB1->begin()), UpdateRE2 = (I2 == BB2->begin());
1274 // Sink the instruction.
1275 BBEnd->getInstList().splice(FirstNonPhiInBBEnd, BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1276 if (!OldPN->use_empty())
1277 OldPN->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1278 OldPN->eraseFromParent();
1279
1280 if (!I2->use_empty())
1281 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1282 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
1283 I2->eraseFromParent();
1284
1285 if (UpdateRE1)
1286 RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend();
1287 if (UpdateRE2)
1288 RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend();
1289 FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = I1;
1290 NumSinkCommons++;
1291 Changed = true;
1292 }
1293 return Changed;
1294}
1295
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001296/// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
1297/// conditional block.
1298///
1299/// We are looking for code like the following:
1300/// BrBB:
1301/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1302/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1303/// ... // function).
1304/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1305/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1306/// ThenBB:
1307/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1308/// br label EndBB
1309/// EndBB:
1310/// ...
1311/// We are going to transform this into:
1312/// BrBB:
1313/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1314/// ... //
1315/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1316/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1317/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1318/// ...
1319///
1320/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1321/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001322static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1323 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001324 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1325 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001326 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001327
1328 // Volatile or atomic.
1329 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001330 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001331
1332 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1333
1334 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
1335 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 10;
1336 for (BasicBlock::reverse_iterator RI = BrBB->rbegin(),
1337 RE = BrBB->rend(); RI != RE && (--MaxNumInstToLookAt); ++RI) {
1338 Instruction *CurI = &*RI;
1339
1340 // Could be calling an instruction that effects memory like free().
1341 if (CurI->mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001342 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001343
1344 StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(CurI);
1345 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1346 if (SI && SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1347 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1348 return SI->getValueOperand();
1349 else if (SI)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001350 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001351 }
1352
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001353 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001354}
1355
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001356/// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001357///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001358/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1359/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1360/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1361/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1362/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1363///
1364/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1365/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1366/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1367/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1368///
1369///
1370/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1371/// \code
1372/// BB:
1373/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1374/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1375/// ThenBB:
1376/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001377/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001378/// EndBB:
1379/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1380/// ...
1381/// \endcode
1382///
1383/// Into this IR:
1384/// \code
1385/// BB:
1386/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1387/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1388/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1389/// ...
1390/// \endcode
1391///
1392/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001393static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001394 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1395 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1396 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1397 return false;
1398
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001399 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1400 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1401
1402 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1403 // to swap the select operands later.
1404 bool Invert = false;
1405 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1406 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1407 Invert = true;
1408 }
1409 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1410
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001411 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1412 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1413 // - They are defined in BB, and
1414 // - They have no side effects, and
1415 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1416 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1417
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001418 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001419 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1420 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001421 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001422 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001423 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
1424 Instruction *I = BBI;
1425 // Skip debug info.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001426 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1427 continue;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001428
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001429 // Only speculatively execution a single instruction (not counting the
1430 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001431 ++SpeculationCost;
1432 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001433 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001434
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001435 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001436 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1437 !(HoistCondStores &&
1438 (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(I, BB, ThenBB,
1439 EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001440 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001441 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
1442 ComputeSpeculationCost(I) > PHINodeFoldingThreshold)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001443 return false;
1444
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001445 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1446 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1447 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1448
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001449 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001450 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001451 // being sunk into the use block.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001452 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001453 i != e; ++i) {
1454 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001455 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB ||
1456 OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
1457 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
1458
1459 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001460 }
1461 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001462
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001463 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
1464 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
1465 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
1466 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator I =
1467 SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(), E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
1468 I != E; ++I)
1469 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001470 ++SpeculationCost;
1471 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001472 return false;
1473 }
1474
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001475 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
1476 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001477 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001478 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001479 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
1480 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001481
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001482 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001483 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001484 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001485 continue;
1486
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001487 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001488 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
1489 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
1490 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001491 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
1492
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001493 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
1494 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001495 return false;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001496 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE) : 0;
1497 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE) : 0;
1498 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001499 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001500
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00001501 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
1502 // getting expanded into Instructions.
1503 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001504 // constant expression.
1505 ++SpeculationCost;
1506 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001507 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001508 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001509
1510 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
1511 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001512 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001513 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001514
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001515 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001516 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001517
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001518 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
1519 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
1520 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(BI);
1521 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
1522 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
1523 if (Invert)
1524 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
1525 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() +
1526 "." + FalseV->getName());
1527 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
1528 }
1529
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001530 // Hoist the instructions.
1531 BB->getInstList().splice(BI, ThenBB->getInstList(), ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001532 std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001533
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001534 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001535 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001536 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
1537 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
1538 unsigned OrigI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
1539 unsigned ThenI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
1540 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValue(OrigI);
1541 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValue(ThenI);
1542
1543 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
1544 if (OrigV == ThenV)
1545 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001546
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001547 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001548 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
1549 // destinations were inverted.
1550 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001551 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001552 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
1553 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueV, FalseV,
1554 TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName());
1555 PN->setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
1556 PN->setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001557 }
1558
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001559 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001560 return true;
1561}
1562
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00001563/// \returns True if this block contains a CallInst with the NoDuplicate
1564/// attribute.
1565static bool HasNoDuplicateCall(const BasicBlock *BB) {
1566 for (BasicBlock::const_iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E; ++I) {
1567 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I);
1568 if (!CI)
1569 continue;
1570 if (CI->cannotDuplicate())
1571 return true;
1572 }
1573 return false;
1574}
1575
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001576/// BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough - Return true if we can thread a branch
1577/// across this block.
1578static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
1579 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001580 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001581
Devang Patel84fceff2009-03-10 18:00:05 +00001582 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001583 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
1584 continue;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001585 if (Size > 10) return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001586 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001587
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001588 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001589 // live outside of the current basic block.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00001590 for (User *U : BBI->users()) {
1591 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
1592 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI)) return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001593 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001594
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001595 // Looks ok, continue checking.
1596 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001597
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001598 return true;
1599}
1600
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001601/// FoldCondBranchOnPHI - If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value
1602/// that is defined in the same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are
1603/// constants, thread edges corresponding to that entry to be branches to their
1604/// ultimate destination.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001605static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout *DL) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001606 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1607 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00001608 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
1609 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001610 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
1611 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001612
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001613 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
1614 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00001615 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001616 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001617 }
1618
1619 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001620 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001621
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00001622 if (HasNoDuplicateCall(BB)) return false;
1623
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001624 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
1625 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001626 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001627 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001628 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1)) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001629
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001630 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
1631 // branch to RealDest.
1632 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
1633 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001634
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001635 if (RealDest == BB) continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001636 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
1637 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator())) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001638
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001639 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
1640 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
1641 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
1642 // the edge we are about to create.
1643 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
1644 RealDest->getName()+".critedge",
1645 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
1646 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001647
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00001648 // Update PHI nodes.
1649 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001650
1651 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
1652 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
1653 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
1654 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
1655 DenseMap<Value*, Value*> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
1656 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
1657 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
1658 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
1659 continue;
1660 }
1661 // Clone the instruction.
1662 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
1663 if (BBI->hasName()) N->setName(BBI->getName()+".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001664
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001665 // Update operands due to translation.
1666 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end();
1667 i != e; ++i) {
1668 DenseMap<Value*, Value*>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
1669 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
1670 *i = PI->second;
1671 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001672
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001673 // Check for trivial simplification.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001674 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001675 TranslateMap[BBI] = V;
1676 delete N; // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001677 } else {
1678 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
1679 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
1680 if (!BBI->use_empty())
1681 TranslateMap[BBI] = N;
1682 }
1683 }
1684
1685 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
1686 // to EdgeBB instead.
1687 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
1688 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1689 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
1690 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
1691 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
1692 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001693
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001694 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001695 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL) | true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001696 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001697
1698 return false;
1699}
1700
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001701/// FoldTwoEntryPHINode - Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry
1702/// PHI node, see if we can eliminate it.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001703static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const DataLayout *DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001704 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
1705 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
1706 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
1707 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
1708 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
1709 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001710 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
1711 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
1712 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001713 if (!IfCond ||
1714 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
1715 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
1716 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001717
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00001718 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
1719 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
1720 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
1721 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
1722 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
1723 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
1724 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
1725 if (NumPhis > 2)
1726 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001727
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001728 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
1729 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
1730 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001731 SmallPtrSet<Instruction*, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00001732 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
1733 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001734
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001735 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
1736 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001737 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001738 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001739 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001740 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001741 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001742
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00001743 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
1744 MaxCostVal0) ||
1745 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
1746 MaxCostVal1))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001747 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001748 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001749
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00001750 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001751 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
1752 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001753 if (!PN) return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001754
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001755 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
1756 // often be turned into switches and other things.
1757 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
1758 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
1759 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
1760 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
1761 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001762
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001763 // If we all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all
1764 // instructions in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If
1765 // not, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so it's not
1766 // worth promoting to select instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001767 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001768 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
1769 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
1770 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001771 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001772 } else {
1773 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
1774 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin();!isa<TerminatorInst>(I);++I)
Devang Patel2032cad2009-02-03 22:12:02 +00001775 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001776 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
1777 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control
1778 // flow, so the xform is not worth it.
1779 return false;
1780 }
1781 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001782
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001783 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001784 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001785 } else {
1786 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
1787 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin();!isa<TerminatorInst>(I);++I)
Devang Patel2032cad2009-02-03 22:12:02 +00001788 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001789 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
1790 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control
1791 // flow, so the xform is not worth it.
1792 return false;
1793 }
1794 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001795
Chris Lattner9fd838d2010-12-14 07:23:10 +00001796 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: "
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001797 << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001798
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001799 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
1800 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001801 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001802 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001803
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001804 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
1805 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001806 if (IfBlock1)
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001807 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt,
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001808 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001809 IfBlock1->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001810 if (IfBlock2)
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001811 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt,
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001812 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001813 IfBlock2->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001814
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001815 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
1816 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001817 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
1818 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001819
1820 SelectInst *NV =
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00001821 cast<SelectInst>(Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, ""));
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001822 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(NV);
1823 NV->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001824 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001825 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001826
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001827 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
1828 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
1829 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
1830 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00001831 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
1832 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001833 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001834 return true;
1835}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001836
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001837/// SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns - If we found a conditional branch that goes
1838/// to two returning blocks, try to merge them together into one return,
1839/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001840static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001841 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001842 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
1843 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
1844 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
1845 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
1846 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001847
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001848 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
1849 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
1850 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001851 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00001852 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001853 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00001854 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001855
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001856 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001857 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
1858 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
1859 // branch into a return.
1860 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
1861 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
1862 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001863 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001864 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001865 return true;
1866 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001867
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001868 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
1869 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
1870 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
1871 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001872
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001873 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
1874 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
1875 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
1876 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
1877 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
1878 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
1879 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001880
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001881 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
1882 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
1883 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
1884 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
1885 // safe.
1886 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
1887 if (TCV->canTrap())
1888 return false;
1889 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
1890 if (FCV->canTrap())
1891 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001892
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001893 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
1894 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
1895 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
1896 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001897
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001898 // Insert select instructions where needed.
1899 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001900 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001901 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001902 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
1903 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
1904 TrueValue = FalseValue;
1905 } else {
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001906 TrueValue = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue,
1907 FalseValue, "retval");
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001908 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001909 }
1910
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001911 Value *RI = !TrueValue ?
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001912 Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
1913
Daniel Dunbar5e0a58b2009-08-23 10:29:55 +00001914 (void) RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001915
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00001916 DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00001917 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI
1918 << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: "<< *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001919
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001920 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
1921
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001922 return true;
1923}
1924
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00001925/// ExtractBranchMetadata - Given a conditional BranchInstruction, retrieve the
1926/// probabilities of the branch taking each edge. Fills in the two APInt
1927/// parameters and return true, or returns false if no or invalid metadata was
1928/// found.
1929static bool ExtractBranchMetadata(BranchInst *BI,
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00001930 uint64_t &ProbTrue, uint64_t &ProbFalse) {
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00001931 assert(BI->isConditional() &&
1932 "Looking for probabilities on unconditional branch?");
1933 MDNode *ProfileData = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Nick Lewycky398255e2011-12-27 18:27:22 +00001934 if (!ProfileData || ProfileData->getNumOperands() != 3) return false;
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00001935 ConstantInt *CITrue = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(ProfileData->getOperand(1));
1936 ConstantInt *CIFalse = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(ProfileData->getOperand(2));
Nick Lewycky398255e2011-12-27 18:27:22 +00001937 if (!CITrue || !CIFalse) return false;
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00001938 ProbTrue = CITrue->getValue().getZExtValue();
1939 ProbFalse = CIFalse->getValue().getZExtValue();
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00001940 return true;
1941}
1942
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00001943/// checkCSEInPredecessor - Return true if the given instruction is available
1944/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
1945///
Benjamin Kramerabbfe692012-07-13 13:25:15 +00001946static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00001947 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
1948 return false;
1949 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = PB->begin(), E = PB->end(); I != E; I++) {
1950 Instruction *PBI = &*I;
1951 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
1952 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
1953 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
1954 Inst->eraseFromParent();
1955 return true;
1956 }
1957 }
1958 return false;
1959}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00001960
Chris Lattner7d4cdae2011-04-11 23:24:57 +00001961/// FoldBranchToCommonDest - If this basic block is simple enough, and if a
1962/// predecessor branches to us and one of our successors, fold the block into
1963/// the predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Dan Gohmanc8ca4962009-06-27 21:30:38 +00001964bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001965 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001966
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001967 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00001968 if (BI->isConditional())
1969 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
1970 else {
1971 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
1972 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
1973 // successor. If such pattern exisits, check for CSE between BB and its
1974 // predecessor.
1975 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
1976 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
1977 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
1978 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
1979 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
1980 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end();
1981 I != E; ) {
1982 Instruction *Curr = I++;
1983 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
1984 Cond = Curr;
1985 break;
1986 }
1987 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
1988 if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB))
1989 return false;
1990 }
1991 }
1992
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001993 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00001994 return false;
1995 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001996
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001997 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
1998 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00001999 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002000
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002001 // Only allow this if the condition is a simple instruction that can be
2002 // executed unconditionally. It must be in the same block as the branch, and
2003 // must be at the front of the block.
Devang Patel916fdce2009-02-04 21:39:48 +00002004 BasicBlock::iterator FrontIt = BB->front();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002005
Devang Patel916fdce2009-02-04 21:39:48 +00002006 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002007 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(FrontIt)) ++FrontIt;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00002008
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002009 // Allow a single instruction to be hoisted in addition to the compare
2010 // that feeds the branch. We later ensure that any values that _it_ uses
2011 // were also live in the predecessor, so that we don't unnecessarily create
2012 // register pressure or inhibit out-of-order execution.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002013 Instruction *BonusInst = nullptr;
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002014 if (&*FrontIt != Cond &&
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002015 FrontIt->hasOneUse() && FrontIt->user_back() == Cond &&
Dan Gohman75d7d5e2011-12-14 23:49:11 +00002016 isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(FrontIt)) {
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002017 BonusInst = &*FrontIt;
2018 ++FrontIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002019
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002020 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2021 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(FrontIt)) ++FrontIt;
Devang Patelbc3d8b22011-04-07 23:11:25 +00002022 }
2023
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002024 // Only a single bonus inst is allowed.
2025 if (&*FrontIt != Cond)
2026 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002027
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002028 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
2029 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = Cond; ++CondIt;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002030
Devang Patel916fdce2009-02-04 21:39:48 +00002031 // Ingore dbg intrinsics.
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002032 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt)) ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002033
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002034 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002035 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002036
2037 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2038 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2039 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2040 if (CE->canTrap())
2041 return false;
2042 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2043 if (CE->canTrap())
2044 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002045
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002046 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
2047 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002048 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002049 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2050 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002051
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002052 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2053 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
2054 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002055
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002056 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2057 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2058 // blocks.
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002059 SmallVector<PHINode*, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002060 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002061 (BI->isConditional() &&
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002062 !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
2063 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2064 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002065 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002066
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002067 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002068 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002069 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002070
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002071 if (BI->isConditional()) {
2072 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest)
2073 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2074 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest)
2075 Opc = Instruction::And;
2076 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest)
2077 Opc = Instruction::And, InvertPredCond = true;
2078 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest)
2079 Opc = Instruction::Or, InvertPredCond = true;
2080 else
2081 continue;
2082 } else {
2083 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2084 continue;
2085 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002086
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002087 // Ensure that any values used in the bonus instruction are also used
2088 // by the terminator of the predecessor. This means that those values
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002089 // must already have been resolved, so we won't be inhibiting the
Nadav Rotem53d32212013-11-12 22:37:16 +00002090 // out-of-order core by speculating them earlier. We also allow
2091 // instructions that are used by the terminator's condition because it
2092 // exposes more merging opportunities.
2093 bool UsedByBranch = (BonusInst && BonusInst->hasOneUse() &&
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002094 BonusInst->user_back() == Cond);
Nadav Rotem53d32212013-11-12 22:37:16 +00002095
2096 if (BonusInst && !UsedByBranch) {
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002097 // Collect the values used by the bonus inst
2098 SmallPtrSet<Value*, 4> UsedValues;
2099 for (Instruction::op_iterator OI = BonusInst->op_begin(),
2100 OE = BonusInst->op_end(); OI != OE; ++OI) {
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00002101 Value *V = *OI;
Nadav Rotem5ba1c6c2013-11-10 04:13:31 +00002102 if (!isa<Constant>(V) && !isa<Argument>(V))
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002103 UsedValues.insert(V);
2104 }
2105
2106 SmallVector<std::pair<Value*, unsigned>, 4> Worklist;
2107 Worklist.push_back(std::make_pair(PBI->getOperand(0), 0));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002108
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002109 // Walk up to four levels back up the use-def chain of the predecessor's
2110 // terminator to see if all those values were used. The choice of four
2111 // levels is arbitrary, to provide a compile-time-cost bound.
2112 while (!Worklist.empty()) {
2113 std::pair<Value*, unsigned> Pair = Worklist.back();
2114 Worklist.pop_back();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002115
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002116 if (Pair.second >= 4) continue;
2117 UsedValues.erase(Pair.first);
2118 if (UsedValues.empty()) break;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002119
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002120 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Pair.first)) {
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002121 for (Instruction::op_iterator OI = I->op_begin(), OE = I->op_end();
2122 OI != OE; ++OI)
2123 Worklist.push_back(std::make_pair(OI->get(), Pair.second+1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002124 }
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002125 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002126
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002127 if (!UsedValues.empty()) return false;
2128 }
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002129
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002130 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002131 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002132
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002133 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2134 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002135 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002136
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002137 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2138 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2139 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2140 } else {
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002141 NewCond = Builder.CreateNot(NewCond,
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002142 PBI->getCondition()->getName()+".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002143 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002144
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002145 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002146 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002147 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002148
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002149 // If we have a bonus inst, clone it into the predecessor block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002150 Instruction *NewBonus = nullptr;
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002151 if (BonusInst) {
2152 NewBonus = BonusInst->clone();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002153
2154 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2155 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2156 // only given the branch precondition.
2157 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2158 // semantics we don't understand.
2159 NewBonus->dropUnknownMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_dbg);
2160
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002161 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI, NewBonus);
2162 NewBonus->takeName(BonusInst);
2163 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName()+".old");
2164 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002165
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002166 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2167 // two conditions together.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00002168 Instruction *New = Cond->clone();
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002169 if (BonusInst) New->replaceUsesOfWith(BonusInst, NewBonus);
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002170 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI, New);
2171 New->takeName(Cond);
2172 Cond->setName(New->getName()+".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002173
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002174 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002175 Instruction *NewCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002176 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(),
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002177 New, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002178 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2179
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002180 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
2181 bool PredHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(PBI, PredTrueWeight,
2182 PredFalseWeight);
2183 bool SuccHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(BI, SuccTrueWeight,
2184 SuccFalseWeight);
2185 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2186
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002187 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002188 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2189 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2190 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
2191 //TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
2192 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2193 //FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
2194 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2195 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2196 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
2197 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * (SuccFalseWeight +
2198 SuccTrueWeight) + PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2199 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002200 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2201 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2202 }
2203 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002204 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2205 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2206 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
2207 //TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
2208 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
2209 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * (SuccFalseWeight +
2210 SuccTrueWeight) + PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2211 //FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2212 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2213 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002214 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2215 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2216 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002217 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2218 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2219 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2220
2221 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),NewWeights.end());
2222 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2223 MDBuilder(BI->getContext()).
2224 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
2225 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002226 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002227 } else {
2228 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2229 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002230 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002231 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
2232 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002233 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002234 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2235 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2236 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2237 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
2238 Instruction *NotCond =
2239 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(),
2240 "not.cond"));
2241 MergedCond =
2242 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And,
2243 NotCond, New,
2244 "and.cond"));
2245 if (PBI_C->isOne())
2246 MergedCond =
2247 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::Or,
2248 PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond,
2249 "or.cond"));
2250 } else {
2251 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2252 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2253 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002254 MergedCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002255 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And,
2256 PBI->getCondition(), New,
2257 "and.cond"));
2258 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
2259 Instruction *NotCond =
2260 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(),
2261 "not.cond"));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002262 MergedCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002263 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::Or,
2264 NotCond, MergedCond,
2265 "or.cond"));
2266 }
2267 }
2268 // Update PHI Node.
2269 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2270 MergedCond);
2271 }
2272 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2273 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2274 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2275 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002276 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002277
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002278 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2279 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
2280
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002281 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
2282 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E; ++I)
2283 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(*I))
2284 I->clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002285
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002286 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002287 }
2288 return false;
2289}
2290
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002291/// SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch - If we have a conditional branch as a
2292/// predecessor of another block, this function tries to simplify it. We know
2293/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
2294/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
2295static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI) {
2296 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
2297 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00002298
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002299 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002300 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002301 // this conditional branch redundant.
2302 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
2303 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2304 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
2305 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
2306 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
2307 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
2308 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002309 BI->setCondition(ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()),
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00002310 CondIsTrue));
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002311 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
2312 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002313
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002314 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
2315 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
2316 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
2317 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002318 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00002319 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()),
Jay Foad52131342011-03-30 11:28:46 +00002320 std::distance(PB, PE),
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002321 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr",
2322 BB->begin());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00002323 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
2324 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
2325 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002326 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002327 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
2328 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002329 PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional() &&
2330 PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
2331 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2332 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002333 NewPN->addIncoming(ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()),
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002334 CondIsTrue), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002335 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002336 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002337 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002338 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002339
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002340 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002341 return true;
2342 }
2343 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002344
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002345 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
2346 // predecessors is a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
2347 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00002348 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
2349 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2350 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
2351 ++BBI;
2352 if (&*BBI != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002353 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00002354
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002355
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00002356 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
2357 if (CE->canTrap())
2358 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002359
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002360 int PBIOp, BIOp;
2361 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
2362 PBIOp = BIOp = 0;
2363 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
2364 PBIOp = 0, BIOp = 1;
2365 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
2366 PBIOp = 1, BIOp = 0;
2367 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
2368 PBIOp = BIOp = 1;
2369 else
2370 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002371
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002372 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
2373 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
2374 // keep getting unwound.
2375 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
2376 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002377
2378 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002379 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
2380 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
2381 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002382
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002383 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2384 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
2385 isa<PHINode>(II); ++II, ++NumPhis)
2386 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
2387 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002388
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002389 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
2390 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002391
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002392 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002393 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002394
2395
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002396 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
2397 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
2398 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
2399 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
2400 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
2401 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
2402 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
2403 if (OtherDest == BB) {
2404 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
2405 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00002406 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
2407 "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002408 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
2409 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002410 }
2411
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002412 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002413
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002414 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
2415 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002416
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002417 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
2418 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002419 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002420 if (PBIOp)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002421 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName()+".not");
2422
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002423 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
2424 if (BIOp)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002425 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName()+".not");
2426
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002427 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002428 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002429
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002430 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
2431 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
2432 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
2433 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002434
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002435 // Update branch weight for PBI.
2436 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
2437 bool PredHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(PBI, PredTrueWeight,
2438 PredFalseWeight);
2439 bool SuccHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(BI, SuccTrueWeight,
2440 SuccFalseWeight);
2441 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2442 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
2443 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ?PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
2444 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
2445 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
2446 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
2447 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
2448 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
2449 SmallVector<uint64_t, 2> NewWeights;
2450 NewWeights.push_back(PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
2451 PredOther * SuccCommon);
2452 NewWeights.push_back(PredOther * SuccOther);
2453 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2454 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2455
2456 SmallVector<uint32_t, 2> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),NewWeights.end());
2457 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2458 MDBuilder(BI->getContext()).
2459 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
2460 }
2461
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002462 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
2463 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002464 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002465
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002466 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
2467 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
2468 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
2469 // them agree.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002470 PHINode *PN;
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002471 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
2472 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(II)); ++II) {
2473 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2474 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
2475 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
2476 if (BIV != PBIV) {
2477 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002478 Value *NV = cast<SelectInst>
2479 (Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName()+".mux"));
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002480 PN->setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002481 }
2482 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002483
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002484 DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
2485 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002486
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002487 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
2488 // one fewer predecessor.
2489 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002490}
2491
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002492// SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect - Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a
2493// branch to TrueBB if Cond is true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
2494// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
2495// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
2496// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
2497static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002498 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
2499 uint32_t TrueWeight,
2500 uint32_t FalseWeight){
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002501 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
2502 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
2503 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
2504 // successor.
2505 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002506 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002507
2508 // Then remove the rest.
2509 for (unsigned I = 0, E = OldTerm->getNumSuccessors(); I != E; ++I) {
2510 BasicBlock *Succ = OldTerm->getSuccessor(I);
2511 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
2512 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002513 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002514 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002515 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002516 else
2517 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent());
2518 }
2519
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002520 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
2521 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
2522
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002523 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002524 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002525 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
2526 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
2527 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002528 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002529 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002530 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
2531 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002532 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
2533 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
2534 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2535 MDBuilder(OldTerm->getContext()).
2536 createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
2537 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002538 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
2539 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
2540 // terminator must be unreachable.
2541 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
2542 } else {
2543 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
2544 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
2545 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002546 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002547 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002548 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002549 else
2550 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002551 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002552 }
2553
2554 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
2555 return true;
2556}
2557
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002558// SimplifySwitchOnSelect - Replaces
2559// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
2560// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
2561// unconditional otherwise.
2562static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
2563 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
2564 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
2565 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
2566 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
2567 return false;
2568
2569 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
2570 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00002571 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getCaseSuccessor();
2572 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002573
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002574 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
2575 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
2576 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
2577 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
2578 if (HasWeights) {
2579 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
2580 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
2581 TrueWeight = (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).
2582 getSuccessorIndex()];
2583 FalseWeight = (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).
2584 getSuccessorIndex()];
2585 }
2586 }
2587
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002588 // Perform the actual simplification.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002589 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB,
2590 TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002591}
2592
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00002593// SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect - Replaces
2594// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
2595// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
2596// with
2597// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
2598static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
2599 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
2600 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
2601 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
2602 if (!TBA || !FBA)
2603 return false;
2604
2605 // Extract the actual blocks.
2606 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
2607 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
2608
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002609 // Perform the actual simplification.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002610 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB,
2611 0, 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00002612}
2613
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002614/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt - This is called when we find an icmp
2615/// instruction (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
2616/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
2617/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
2618/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
2619/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
2620/// like:
2621///
2622/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
2623/// DEFAULT:
2624/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
2625/// br label %end
2626/// end:
2627/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002628///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002629/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
2630/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00002631static bool TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
2632 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002633 const DataLayout *DL) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002634 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00002635
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002636 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
2637 // complex.
2638 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse()) return false;
2639
2640 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
2641 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002642
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002643 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
2644 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
2645 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
2646 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002647 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator())) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002648
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002649 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
2650 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
2651 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002652
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002653 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
2654 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
2655 // away.
2656 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
2657 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
2658 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
2659 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002660
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002661 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002662 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002663 ICI->eraseFromParent();
2664 }
2665 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002666 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002667 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002668
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00002669 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
2670 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
2671 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00002672 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00002673 Value *V;
2674 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
2675 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
2676 else
2677 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002678
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00002679 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
2680 ICI->eraseFromParent();
2681 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002682 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00002683 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002684
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002685 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
2686 // the block.
2687 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002688 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002689 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002690 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
2691 return false;
2692
2693 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
2694 // true in the PHI.
2695 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
2696 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
2697
2698 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
2699 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
2700
2701 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
2702 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
2703 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
2704 ICI->eraseFromParent();
2705
2706 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
2707 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
2708 BasicBlock *NewBB = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge",
2709 BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00002710 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
2711 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
2712 if (HasWeights) {
2713 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
2714 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
2715 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
2716 Weights[0] = (Weights[0]+1) >> 1;
2717 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
2718
2719 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
2720 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2721 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).
2722 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
2723 }
2724 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002725 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002726
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002727 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00002728 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
2729 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
2730 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002731 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
2732 return true;
2733}
2734
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002735/// SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain - The specified branch is a conditional branch.
2736/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
2737/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002738static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout *DL,
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002739 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002740 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002741 if (!Cond) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002742
2743
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002744 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
2745 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
2746 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002747 Value *CompVal = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002748 std::vector<ConstantInt*> Values;
2749 bool TrueWhenEqual = true;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002750 Value *ExtraCase = nullptr;
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00002751 unsigned UsedICmps = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002752
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002753 if (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002754 CompVal = GatherConstantCompares(Cond, Values, ExtraCase, DL, true,
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00002755 UsedICmps);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002756 } else if (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::And) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002757 CompVal = GatherConstantCompares(Cond, Values, ExtraCase, DL, false,
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00002758 UsedICmps);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002759 TrueWhenEqual = false;
2760 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002761
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002762 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002763 if (!CompVal) return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002764
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00002765 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
2766 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
2767 return false;
2768
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002769 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
2770 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
2771 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
2772 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002773
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002774 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
2775 // transformation. A switch with one value is just an cond branch.
2776 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002777
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00002778 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
2779 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
2780
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002781 // Figure out which block is which destination.
2782 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2783 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2784 if (!TrueWhenEqual) std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002785
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002786 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002787
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002788 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002789 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n" << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002790
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002791 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
2792 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
2793 // right before the condbr to handle it.
2794 if (ExtraCase) {
2795 BasicBlock *NewBB = BB->splitBasicBlock(BI, "switch.early.test");
2796 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
2797 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002798 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2799
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002800 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002801 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002802 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002803 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002804
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002805 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002806
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00002807 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
2808 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002809 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002810
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002811 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
2812 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002813 BB = NewBB;
2814 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002815
2816 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002817 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
2818 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002819 assert(DL && "Cannot switch on pointer without DataLayout");
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002820 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CompVal,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002821 DL->getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()),
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002822 "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002823 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002824
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002825 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002826 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00002827
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002828 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
2829 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
2830 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002831
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002832 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
2833 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
2834 // the number of edges added.
2835 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin();
2836 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
2837 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
2838 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2839 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size()-1; i != e; ++i)
2840 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
2841 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002842
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002843 // Erase the old branch instruction.
2844 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002845
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002846 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002847 return true;
2848}
2849
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00002850bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
2851 // If this is a trivial landing pad that just continues unwinding the caught
2852 // exception then zap the landing pad, turning its invokes into calls.
2853 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
2854 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
2855 if (RI->getValue() != LPInst)
2856 // Not a landing pad, or the resume is not unwinding the exception that
2857 // caused control to branch here.
2858 return false;
2859
2860 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
2861 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst, E = RI;
2862 while (++I != E)
2863 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2864 return false;
2865
2866 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Bill Wendling9534d882013-03-11 20:53:00 +00002867 bool InvokeRequiresTableEntry = false;
2868 bool Changed = false;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00002869 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
2870 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>((*PI++)->getTerminator());
Bill Wendling9534d882013-03-11 20:53:00 +00002871
2872 if (II->hasFnAttr(Attribute::UWTable)) {
2873 // Don't remove an `invoke' instruction if the ABI requires an entry into
2874 // the table.
2875 InvokeRequiresTableEntry = true;
2876 continue;
2877 }
2878
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00002879 SmallVector<Value*, 8> Args(II->op_begin(), II->op_end() - 3);
Bill Wendling9534d882013-03-11 20:53:00 +00002880
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00002881 // Insert a call instruction before the invoke.
2882 CallInst *Call = CallInst::Create(II->getCalledValue(), Args, "", II);
2883 Call->takeName(II);
2884 Call->setCallingConv(II->getCallingConv());
2885 Call->setAttributes(II->getAttributes());
2886 Call->setDebugLoc(II->getDebugLoc());
2887
2888 // Anything that used the value produced by the invoke instruction now uses
2889 // the value produced by the call instruction. Note that we do this even
2890 // for void functions and calls with no uses so that the callgraph edge is
2891 // updated.
2892 II->replaceAllUsesWith(Call);
2893 BB->removePredecessor(II->getParent());
2894
2895 // Insert a branch to the normal destination right before the invoke.
2896 BranchInst::Create(II->getNormalDest(), II);
2897
2898 // Finally, delete the invoke instruction!
2899 II->eraseFromParent();
Bill Wendling9534d882013-03-11 20:53:00 +00002900 Changed = true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00002901 }
2902
Bill Wendling9534d882013-03-11 20:53:00 +00002903 if (!InvokeRequiresTableEntry)
2904 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
2905 BB->eraseFromParent();
2906
2907 return Changed;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00002908}
2909
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002910bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002911 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
2912 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator()) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002913
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002914 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
2915 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
2916 SmallVector<BranchInst*, 8> CondBranchPreds;
2917 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2918 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
2919 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
2920 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
2921 if (BI->isUnconditional())
2922 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
2923 else
2924 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
2925 }
2926 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002927
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002928 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00002929 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002930 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
2931 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
2932 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
2933 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00002934 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002935 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002936
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002937 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
2938 if (pred_begin(BB) == pred_end(BB))
2939 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
2940 BB->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002941
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002942 return true;
2943 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002944
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002945 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
2946 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
2947 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
2948 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
2949 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002950
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002951 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
2952 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
2953 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002954 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002955 return true;
2956 }
2957 return false;
2958}
2959
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002960bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
2961 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002962
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002963 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002964
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002965 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
2966 // be removed, do so.
2967 while (UI != BB->begin()) {
2968 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI;
2969 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00002970 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
2971 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
2972 // operations may have this effect.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002973 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI)) break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00002974
2975 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
2976 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
2977 if (SI->isVolatile())
2978 break;
2979 } else if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
2980 if (LI->isVolatile())
2981 break;
2982 } else if (AtomicRMWInst *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
2983 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
2984 break;
2985 } else if (AtomicCmpXchgInst *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
2986 if (CXI->isVolatile())
2987 break;
2988 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
2989 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002990 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00002991 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00002992 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
2993 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
2994 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
2995 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00002996 }
2997
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00002998 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
2999 if (!BBI->use_empty())
3000 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003001 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003002 Changed = true;
3003 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003004
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003005 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
3006 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
3007 if (&BB->front() != UI) return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003008
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003009 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
3010 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
3011 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003012 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003013 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
3014 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
3015 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
3016 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
3017 TI->eraseFromParent();
3018 Changed = true;
3019 }
3020 } else {
3021 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003022 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003023 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3024 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003025 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003026 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3027 Changed = true;
3028 }
3029 }
3030 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003031 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003032 i != e; ++i)
3033 if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == BB) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003034 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
3035 SI->removeCase(i);
3036 --i; --e;
3037 Changed = true;
3038 }
3039 // If the default value is unreachable, figure out the most popular
3040 // destination and make it the default.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003041 if (SI->getDefaultDest() == BB) {
Eli Friedmanc4414c62011-03-15 02:23:35 +00003042 std::map<BasicBlock*, std::pair<unsigned, unsigned> > Popularity;
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003043 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003044 i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00003045 std::pair<unsigned, unsigned> &entry =
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003046 Popularity[i.getCaseSuccessor()];
Eli Friedmanc4414c62011-03-15 02:23:35 +00003047 if (entry.first == 0) {
3048 entry.first = 1;
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003049 entry.second = i.getCaseIndex();
Eli Friedmanc4414c62011-03-15 02:23:35 +00003050 } else {
3051 entry.first++;
3052 }
3053 }
3054
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003055 // Find the most popular block.
3056 unsigned MaxPop = 0;
Eli Friedmanc4414c62011-03-15 02:23:35 +00003057 unsigned MaxIndex = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003058 BasicBlock *MaxBlock = nullptr;
Eli Friedmanc4414c62011-03-15 02:23:35 +00003059 for (std::map<BasicBlock*, std::pair<unsigned, unsigned> >::iterator
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003060 I = Popularity.begin(), E = Popularity.end(); I != E; ++I) {
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003061 if (I->second.first > MaxPop ||
Eli Friedmanc4414c62011-03-15 02:23:35 +00003062 (I->second.first == MaxPop && MaxIndex > I->second.second)) {
3063 MaxPop = I->second.first;
3064 MaxIndex = I->second.second;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003065 MaxBlock = I->first;
3066 }
3067 }
3068 if (MaxBlock) {
3069 // Make this the new default, allowing us to delete any explicit
3070 // edges to it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003071 SI->setDefaultDest(MaxBlock);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003072 Changed = true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003073
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003074 // If MaxBlock has phinodes in it, remove MaxPop-1 entries from
3075 // it.
3076 if (isa<PHINode>(MaxBlock->begin()))
3077 for (unsigned i = 0; i != MaxPop-1; ++i)
3078 MaxBlock->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003079
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003080 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003081 i != e; ++i)
3082 if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == MaxBlock) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003083 SI->removeCase(i);
3084 --i; --e;
3085 }
3086 }
3087 }
3088 } else if (InvokeInst *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
3089 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
3090 // Convert the invoke to a call instruction. This would be a good
3091 // place to note that the call does not throw though.
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003092 BranchInst *BI = Builder.CreateBr(II->getNormalDest());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003093 II->removeFromParent(); // Take out of symbol table
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003094
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003095 // Insert the call now...
3096 SmallVector<Value*, 8> Args(II->op_begin(), II->op_end()-3);
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003097 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
3098 CallInst *CI = Builder.CreateCall(II->getCalledValue(),
Jay Foad5bd375a2011-07-15 08:37:34 +00003099 Args, II->getName());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003100 CI->setCallingConv(II->getCallingConv());
3101 CI->setAttributes(II->getAttributes());
3102 // If the invoke produced a value, the call does now instead.
3103 II->replaceAllUsesWith(CI);
3104 delete II;
3105 Changed = true;
3106 }
3107 }
3108 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003109
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003110 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
3111 if (pred_begin(BB) == pred_end(BB) &&
3112 BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
3113 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3114 BB->eraseFromParent();
3115 return true;
3116 }
3117
3118 return Changed;
3119}
3120
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003121/// TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp - Turns a switch with that contains only a
3122/// integer range comparison into a sub, an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00003123static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003124 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003125
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003126 // Make sure all cases point to the same destination and gather the values.
3127 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> Cases;
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003128 SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003129 Cases.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
3130 SwitchInst::CaseIt PrevI = I++;
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003131 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); I != E; PrevI = I++) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003132 if (PrevI.getCaseSuccessor() != I.getCaseSuccessor())
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003133 return false;
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003134 Cases.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003135 }
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003136 assert(Cases.size() == SI->getNumCases() && "Not all cases gathered");
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003137
3138 // Sort the case values, then check if they form a range we can transform.
3139 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3140 for (unsigned I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3141 if (Cases[I-1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue()+1)
3142 return false;
3143 }
3144
3145 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(Cases.back());
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003146 Constant *NumCases = ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), SI->getNumCases());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003147
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003148 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
3149 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Devang Patel3015a542011-05-19 00:13:33 +00003150 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName()+".off");
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00003151 Value *Cmp;
3152 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
3153 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && SI->getNumCases() != 0)
3154 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
3155 else
3156 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003157 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003158 Cmp, SI->case_begin().getCaseSuccessor(), SI->getDefaultDest());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003159
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003160 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
3161 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3162 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3163 if (HasWeights) {
3164 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3165 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3166 // Combine all weights for the cases to be the true weight of NewBI.
3167 // We assume that the sum of all weights for a Terminator can fit into 32
3168 // bits.
3169 uint32_t NewTrueWeight = 0;
3170 for (unsigned I = 1, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I)
3171 NewTrueWeight += (uint32_t)Weights[I];
3172 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3173 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).
3174 createBranchWeights(NewTrueWeight,
3175 (uint32_t)Weights[0]));
3176 }
3177 }
3178
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003179 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successor's PHI nodes.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003180 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->case_begin().getCaseSuccessor()->begin();
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003181 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003182 for (unsigned I = 0, E = SI->getNumCases()-1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003183 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
3184 }
3185 SI->eraseFromParent();
3186
3187 return true;
3188}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003189
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003190/// EliminateDeadSwitchCases - Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
3191/// and use it to remove dead cases.
3192static bool EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI) {
3193 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00003194 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003195 APInt KnownZero(Bits, 0), KnownOne(Bits, 0);
Jay Foada0653a32014-05-14 21:14:37 +00003196 computeKnownBits(Cond, KnownZero, KnownOne);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003197
3198 // Gather dead cases.
3199 SmallVector<ConstantInt*, 8> DeadCases;
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003200 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003201 if ((I.getCaseValue()->getValue() & KnownZero) != 0 ||
3202 (I.getCaseValue()->getValue() & KnownOne) != KnownOne) {
3203 DeadCases.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003204 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case '"
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003205 << I.getCaseValue() << "' is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003206 }
3207 }
3208
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003209 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3210 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3211 if (HasWeight) {
3212 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3213 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
3214 }
3215
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003216 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
3217 for (unsigned I = 0, E = DeadCases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003218 SwitchInst::CaseIt Case = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCases[I]);
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003219 assert(Case != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003220 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003221 if (HasWeight) {
3222 std::swap(Weights[Case.getCaseIndex()+1], Weights.back());
3223 Weights.pop_back();
3224 }
3225
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003226 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003227 Case.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003228 SI->removeCase(Case);
3229 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00003230 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003231 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
3232 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3233 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).
3234 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
3235 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003236
3237 return !DeadCases.empty();
3238}
3239
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003240/// FindPHIForConditionForwarding - If BB would be eligible for simplification
3241/// by TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
3242/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
3243/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
3244/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
3245static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
3246 BasicBlock *BB,
3247 int *PhiIndex) {
3248 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003249 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003250 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003251 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003252
3253 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
3254 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003255 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003256
3257 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
3258
3259 BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
3260 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
3261 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
3262 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
3263
3264 Value *InValue = PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3265 if (InValue != CaseValue) continue;
3266
3267 *PhiIndex = Idx;
3268 return PHI;
3269 }
3270
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003271 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003272}
3273
3274/// ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI - Try to forward the condition of a switch
3275/// instruction to a phi node dominated by the switch, if that would mean that
3276/// some of the destination blocks of the switch can be folded away.
3277/// Returns true if a change is made.
3278static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
3279 typedef DenseMap<PHINode*, SmallVector<int,4> > ForwardingNodesMap;
3280 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
3281
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003282 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003283 ConstantInt *CaseValue = I.getCaseValue();
3284 BasicBlock *CaseDest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003285
3286 int PhiIndex;
3287 PHINode *PHI = FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest,
3288 &PhiIndex);
3289 if (!PHI) continue;
3290
3291 ForwardingNodes[PHI].push_back(PhiIndex);
3292 }
3293
3294 bool Changed = false;
3295
3296 for (ForwardingNodesMap::iterator I = ForwardingNodes.begin(),
3297 E = ForwardingNodes.end(); I != E; ++I) {
3298 PHINode *Phi = I->first;
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003299 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = I->second;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003300
3301 if (Indexes.size() < 2) continue;
3302
3303 for (size_t I = 0, E = Indexes.size(); I != E; ++I)
3304 Phi->setIncomingValue(Indexes[I], SI->getCondition());
3305 Changed = true;
3306 }
3307
3308 return Changed;
3309}
3310
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003311/// ValidLookupTableConstant - Return true if the backend will be able to handle
3312/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Hans Wennborg08238ad2012-09-07 08:22:57 +00003313static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00003314 if (C->isThreadDependent())
3315 return false;
3316 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
3317 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003318
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00003319 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C))
3320 return CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing();
3321
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003322 return isa<ConstantFP>(C) ||
3323 isa<ConstantInt>(C) ||
3324 isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) ||
3325 isa<GlobalValue>(C) ||
3326 isa<UndefValue>(C);
3327}
3328
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003329/// LookupConstant - If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00003330/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003331static Constant *LookupConstant(Value *V,
3332 const SmallDenseMap<Value*, Constant*>& ConstantPool) {
3333 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
3334 return C;
3335 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
3336}
3337
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003338/// ConstantFold - Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
3339/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
3340/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00003341/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003342static Constant *
3343ConstantFold(Instruction *I,
3344 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool,
3345 const DataLayout *DL) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003346 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003347 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
3348 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003349 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003350 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
3351 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
3352 if (A->isNullValue())
3353 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003354 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003355 }
3356
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003357 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
3358 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
3359 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
3360 COps.push_back(A);
3361 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003362 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003363 }
3364
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003365 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I))
3366 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
3367 COps[1], DL);
3368
3369 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I->getOpcode(), I->getType(), COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003370}
3371
3372/// GetCaseResults - Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
3373/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00003374/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003375/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003376static bool
3377GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI,
3378 ConstantInt *CaseVal,
3379 BasicBlock *CaseDest,
3380 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003381 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *> > &Res,
3382 const DataLayout *DL) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003383 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
3384 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
3385
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003386 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
3387 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
3388 SmallDenseMap<Value*, Constant*> ConstantPool;
3389 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
3390 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = CaseDest->begin(), E = CaseDest->end(); I != E;
3391 ++I) {
3392 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(I)) {
3393 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
3394 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1)
3395 return false;
3396 Pred = CaseDest;
3397 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
3398 } else if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3399 // Skip debug intrinsic.
3400 continue;
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003401 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(I, ConstantPool, DL)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003402 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
3403 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(I, C));
3404 } else {
3405 break;
3406 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003407 }
3408
3409 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
3410 if (!*CommonDest)
3411 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
3412 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
3413 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
3414 return false;
3415
3416 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
3417 BasicBlock::iterator I = (*CommonDest)->begin();
3418 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
3419 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
3420 if (Idx == -1)
3421 continue;
3422
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003423 Constant *ConstVal = LookupConstant(PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx),
3424 ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003425 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003426 return false;
3427
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003428 // Note: If the constant comes from constant-propagating the case value
3429 // through the CaseDest basic block, it will be safe to remove the
3430 // instructions in that block. They cannot be used (except in the phi nodes
3431 // we visit) outside CaseDest, because that block does not dominate its
3432 // successor. If it did, we would not be in this phi node.
3433
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003434 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
3435 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal))
3436 return false;
3437
3438 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(PHI, ConstVal));
3439 }
3440
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003441 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003442}
3443
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003444namespace {
3445 /// SwitchLookupTable - This class represents a lookup table that can be used
3446 /// to replace a switch.
3447 class SwitchLookupTable {
3448 public:
3449 /// SwitchLookupTable - Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement
3450 /// with the contents of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the
3451 /// table.
3452 SwitchLookupTable(Module &M,
3453 uint64_t TableSize,
3454 ConstantInt *Offset,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003455 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*> >& Values,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003456 Constant *DefaultValue,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003457 const DataLayout *DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003458
3459 /// BuildLookup - Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
3460 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
3461 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
3462
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003463 /// WouldFitInRegister - Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
3464 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003465 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout *DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003466 uint64_t TableSize,
3467 const Type *ElementType);
3468
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003469 private:
3470 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
3471 // different ways.
3472 enum {
3473 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
3474 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
3475 SingleValueKind,
3476
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003477 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
3478 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
3479 // shift and mask operations.
3480 BitMapKind,
3481
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003482 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
3483 // instructions from the table.
3484 ArrayKind
3485 } Kind;
3486
3487 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
3488 Constant *SingleValue;
3489
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003490 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
3491 ConstantInt *BitMap;
3492 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy;
3493
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003494 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
3495 GlobalVariable *Array;
3496 };
3497}
3498
3499SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(Module &M,
3500 uint64_t TableSize,
3501 ConstantInt *Offset,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003502 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*> >& Values,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003503 Constant *DefaultValue,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003504 const DataLayout *DL)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003505 : SingleValue(nullptr), BitMap(nullptr), BitMapElementTy(nullptr),
3506 Array(nullptr) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00003507 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
3508 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003509
3510 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003511 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003512
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003513 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
3514
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003515 // Build up the table contents.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003516 SmallVector<Constant*, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
3517 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3518 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
3519 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003520 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003521
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003522 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue())
3523 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003524 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
3525
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003526 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003527 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003528 }
3529
3530 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003531 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003532 assert(DefaultValue && "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
3533 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003534 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
3535 if (!TableContents[I])
3536 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003537 }
3538
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003539 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003540 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003541 }
3542
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003543 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
3544 // that single value.
3545 if (SingleValue) {
3546 Kind = SingleValueKind;
3547 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003548 }
3549
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003550 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003551 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003552 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003553 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
3554 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
3555 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00003556 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
3557 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
3558 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
3559 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
3560 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003561 }
3562 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
3563 BitMapElementTy = IT;
3564 Kind = BitMapKind;
3565 ++NumBitMaps;
3566 return;
3567 }
3568
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003569 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003570 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003571 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
3572
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003573 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/ true,
3574 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage,
3575 Initializer,
3576 "switch.table");
3577 Array->setUnnamedAddr(true);
3578 Kind = ArrayKind;
3579}
3580
3581Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
3582 switch (Kind) {
3583 case SingleValueKind:
3584 return SingleValue;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003585 case BitMapKind: {
3586 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
3587 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
3588
3589 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
3590 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
3591 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +00003592 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003593
3594 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
3595 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(ShiftAmt,
3596 ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
3597 "switch.shiftamt");
3598
3599 // Shift down.
3600 Value *DownShifted = Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt,
3601 "switch.downshift");
3602 // Mask off.
3603 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy,
3604 "switch.masked");
3605 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003606 case ArrayKind: {
3607 Value *GEPIndices[] = { Builder.getInt32(0), Index };
3608 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array, GEPIndices,
3609 "switch.gep");
3610 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
3611 }
3612 }
3613 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
3614}
3615
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003616bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout *DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003617 uint64_t TableSize,
3618 const Type *ElementType) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003619 if (!DL)
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003620 return false;
3621 const IntegerType *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
3622 if (!IT)
3623 return false;
3624 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
3625 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00003626
3627 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
3628 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX/IT->getBitWidth())
3629 return false;
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003630 return DL->fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003631}
3632
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003633/// ShouldBuildLookupTable - Determine whether a lookup table should be built
Hans Wennborg5cf30be2013-06-04 11:22:30 +00003634/// for this switch, based on the number of cases, size of the table and the
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003635/// types of the results.
3636static bool ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003637 uint64_t TableSize,
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003638 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003639 const DataLayout *DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003640 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Type*>& ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00003641 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
3642 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003643
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00003644 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00003645 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003646 for (SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Type*>::const_iterator I = ResultTypes.begin(),
3647 E = ResultTypes.end(); I != E; ++I) {
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00003648 Type *Ty = I->second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00003649
3650 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003651 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00003652
3653 // Saturate this flag to false.
3654 AllTablesFitInRegister = AllTablesFitInRegister &&
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003655 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00003656
3657 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
3658 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
3659 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
3660 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00003661 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003662 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00003663
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00003664 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
3665 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
3666 return true;
3667
3668 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
3669 if (HasIllegalType)
3670 return false;
3671
3672 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
3673 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
3674 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
3675 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003676}
3677
3678/// SwitchToLookupTable - If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
3679/// phi nodes in a common successor block with different constant values,
3680/// replace the switch with lookup tables.
3681static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003682 IRBuilder<> &Builder,
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003683 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003684 const DataLayout* DL) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003685 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00003686
Hans Wennborgc3c8d952012-11-07 21:35:12 +00003687 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003688 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables())
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00003689 return false;
3690
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003691 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
3692 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
3693
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003694 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
3695 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
3696 // string and lookup indices into that.
3697
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00003698 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make them
3699 // faster, so we don't analyze them.
3700 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003701 return false;
3702
3703 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
3704 // common destination, as well as the the min and max case values.
3705 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
3706 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
3707 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
3708 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
3709
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003710 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00003711 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*>, 4> ResultListTy;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003712 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
3713 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Constant*> DefaultResults;
3714 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Type*> ResultTypes;
3715 SmallVector<PHINode*, 4> PHIs;
3716
3717 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
3718 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
3719 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
3720 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
3721 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
3722 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
3723
3724 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
3725 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode*, Constant*>, 4> ResultsTy;
3726 ResultsTy Results;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003727 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003728 Results, DL))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003729 return false;
3730
3731 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
3732 for (ResultsTy::iterator I = Results.begin(), E = Results.end(); I!=E; ++I) {
3733 if (!ResultLists.count(I->first))
3734 PHIs.push_back(I->first);
3735 ResultLists[I->first].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, I->second));
3736 }
3737 }
3738
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003739 // Keep track of the result types.
3740 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3741 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
3742 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
3743 }
3744
3745 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
3746 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
3747 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
3748 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
3749
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00003750 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
3751 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00003752 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode*, Constant*>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00003753 bool HasDefaultResults = false;
3754 if (TableHasHoles) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003755 HasDefaultResults = GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(),
3756 &CommonDest, DefaultResultsList, DL);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00003757 }
3758 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
3759 if (NeedMask) {
3760 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
3761 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
3762 return false;
3763 if (!(DL && DL->fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize)))
3764 return false;
3765 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003766
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00003767 for (size_t I = 0, E = DefaultResultsList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3768 PHINode *PHI = DefaultResultsList[I].first;
3769 Constant *Result = DefaultResultsList[I].second;
3770 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003771 }
3772
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003773 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003774 return false;
3775
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003776 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003777 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003778 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(),
3779 "switch.lookup",
3780 CommonDest->getParent(),
3781 CommonDest);
3782
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00003783 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003784 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
3785 Value *TableIndex = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal,
3786 "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00003787
3788 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
3789 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00003790 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003791 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00003792 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
3793 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
3794 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
3795
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00003796 // If we have a fully covered lookup table, unconditionally branch to the
3797 // lookup table BB. Otherwise, check if the condition value is within the case
3798 // range. If it is so, branch to the new BB. Otherwise branch to SI's default
3799 // destination.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00003800 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = MaxTableSize == TableSize;
3801 if (GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
3802 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00003803 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00003804 } else {
3805 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(
3806 MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
3807 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
3808 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003809
3810 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
3811 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00003812
3813 if (NeedMask) {
3814 // Before doing the lookup we do the hole check.
3815 // The LookupBB is therefore re-purposed to do the hole check
3816 // and we create a new LookupBB.
3817 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
3818 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
3819 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(),
3820 "switch.lookup",
3821 CommonDest->getParent(),
3822 CommonDest);
3823
3824 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
3825 APInt MaskInt(TableSize, 0);
3826 APInt One(TableSize, 1);
3827 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
3828 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3829 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() -
3830 MinCaseVal->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
3831 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
3832 }
3833 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
3834
3835 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
3836 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
3837 // else continue with table lookup.
3838 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
3839 Value *MaskIndex = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy,
3840 "switch.maskindex");
3841 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex,
3842 "switch.shifted");
3843 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(Shifted,
3844 Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()),
3845 "switch.lobit");
3846 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
3847
3848 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
3849 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
3850 }
3851
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003852 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003853 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3854 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003855
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00003856 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
3857 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003858 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultLists[PHI],
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00003859 DV, DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003860
3861 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003862
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00003863 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
3864 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003865 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
3866 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00003867 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
3868 ReturnedEarly = true;
3869 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003870 }
3871
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00003872 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003873 }
3874
3875 if (!ReturnedEarly)
3876 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
3877
3878 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00003879 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003880 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00003881
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00003882 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00003883 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003884 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
3885 }
3886 SI->eraseFromParent();
3887
3888 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00003889 if (NeedMask)
3890 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003891 return true;
3892}
3893
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00003894bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003895 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
3896
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00003897 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
3898 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
3899 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
3900 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
3901 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003902 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003903
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00003904 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
3905 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
3906 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003907 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003908
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00003909 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
3910 // away into any preds.
3911 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
3912 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
3913 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
3914 ++BBI;
3915 if (SI == &*BBI)
3916 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003917 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00003918 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003919
3920 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00003921 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003922 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003923
3924 // Remove unreachable cases.
3925 if (EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003926 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003927
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003928 if (ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003929 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003930
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003931 if (SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, TTI, DL))
3932 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003933
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003934 return false;
3935}
3936
3937bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
3938 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
3939 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003940
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003941 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
3942 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
3943 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
3944 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
3945 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest)) {
3946 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
3947 IBI->removeDestination(i);
3948 --i; --e;
3949 Changed = true;
3950 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003951 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003952
3953 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
3954 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
3955 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
3956 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
3957 return true;
3958 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003959
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003960 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
3961 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
3962 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
3963 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
3964 return true;
3965 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003966
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003967 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
3968 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003969 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003970 }
3971 return Changed;
3972}
3973
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003974bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder){
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003975 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003976
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00003977 if (SinkCommon && SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BI))
3978 return true;
3979
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003980 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
Rafael Espindolab10a0f22011-06-30 20:14:24 +00003981 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbgOrLifetime();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003982 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
3983 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
3984 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003985
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003986 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison
3987 // against a constant, try to simplify the block.
3988 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
3989 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
3990 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
3991 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00003992 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003993 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, TTI, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003994 return true;
3995 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003996
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00003997 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
3998 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
3999 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
4000 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
4001 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004002 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004003 return false;
4004}
4005
4006
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004007bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004008 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004009
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004010 // Conditional branch
4011 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
4012 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
4013 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
4014 // switch.
4015 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004016 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004017 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004018
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004019 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
4020 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4021 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin();
4022 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4023 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
4024 ++I;
4025 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00004026 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004027 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004028 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())){
4029 ++I;
4030 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4031 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
4032 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00004033 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004034 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004035 }
4036 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004037
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004038 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004039 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, DL, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004040 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004041
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00004042 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
4043 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
4044 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
4045 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004046 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004047
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004048 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
4049 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
4050 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
4051 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004052 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
4053 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Rafael Espindola964602d2011-05-19 02:26:30 +00004054 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004055 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004056 } else {
4057 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
4058 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to successor #1.
4059 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
4060 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
4061 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00004062 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0)))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004063 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004064 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004065 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004066 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
4067 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to successor #0.
4068 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
4069 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
4070 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00004071 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1)))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004072 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004073 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004074
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004075 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
4076 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
4077 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
4078 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004079 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL))
4080 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004081
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004082 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
4083 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
4084 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
4085 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
4086 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004087 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004088
4089 return false;
4090}
4091
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004092/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
4093static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
4094 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
4095 if (!C)
4096 return false;
4097
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00004098 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004099 return false;
4100
4101 if (C->isNullValue()) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00004102 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00004103 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004104
4105 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
4106 // control flow (eg. calls)
4107 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I); &*i != Use; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00004108 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004109 return false;
4110
4111 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
4112 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
4113 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
4114 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
4115
4116 // Look through bitcasts.
4117 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
4118 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
4119
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00004120 // Load from null is undefined.
4121 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00004122 if (!LI->isVolatile())
4123 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004124
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00004125 // Store to null is undefined.
4126 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00004127 if (!SI->isVolatile())
4128 return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 && SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004129 }
4130 return false;
4131}
4132
4133/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00004134/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004135static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
4136 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = BB->begin();
4137 PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(i); ++i)
4138 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
4139 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI->getIncomingValue(i), PHI)) {
4140 TerminatorInst *T = PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
4141 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
4142 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
4143 BB->removePredecessor(PHI->getIncomingBlock(i));
4144 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
4145 // destination from conditional branches.
4146 if (BI->isUnconditional())
4147 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
4148 else
4149 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1) :
4150 BI->getSuccessor(0));
4151 BI->eraseFromParent();
4152 return true;
4153 }
4154 // TODO: SwitchInst.
4155 }
4156
4157 return false;
4158}
4159
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00004160bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00004161 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004162
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00004163 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004164 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004165
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00004166 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
4167 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00004168 if ((pred_begin(BB) == pred_end(BB) &&
4169 BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00004170 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00004171 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
Chris Lattner7eb270e2008-12-03 06:40:52 +00004172 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004173 return true;
4174 }
4175
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00004176 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
4177 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00004178 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00004179
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00004180 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
4181 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
4182
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004183 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
4184 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
4185
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00004186 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
4187 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
4188 // if there are no PHI nodes.
4189 //
4190 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
4191 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004192
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00004193 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
4194
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00004195 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
4196 // eliminate it, do so now.
4197 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
4198 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004199 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00004200
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004201 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004202 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004203 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00004204 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004205 } else {
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004206 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004207 }
4208 } else if (ReturnInst *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004209 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder)) return true;
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +00004210 } else if (ResumeInst *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
4211 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004212 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004213 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004214 } else if (UnreachableInst *UI =
4215 dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
4216 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004217 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI =
4218 dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
4219 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI)) return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00004220 }
4221
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00004222 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004223}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00004224
4225/// SimplifyCFG - This function is used to do simplification of a CFG. For
4226/// example, it adjusts branches to branches to eliminate the extra hop, it
4227/// eliminates unreachable basic blocks, and does other "peephole" optimization
4228/// of the CFG. It returns true if a modification was made.
4229///
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004230bool llvm::SimplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004231 const DataLayout *DL) {
4232 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, DL).run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00004233}